Download Samsung VP-DX105I راهنمای محصول

page
1
page
2
page
3
page
4
page
5
page
6
page
7
page
8
page
9
page
10
page
11
page
12
page
13
page
14
page
15
page
16
page
17
page
18
page
19
page
20
page
21
page
22
page
23
page
24
page
25
page
26
page
27
page
28
page
29
page
30
page
31
page
32
page
33
page
34
page
35
page
36
page
37
page
38
page
39
page
40
page
41
page
42
page
43
page
44
page
45
page
46
page
47
page
48
page
49
page
50
page
51
page
52
page
53
page
54
page
55
page
56
page
57
page
58
page
59
page
60
page
61
page
62
page
63
page
64
page
65
page
66
page
67
page
68
page
69
page
70
page
71
page
72
page
73
page
74
page
75
page
76
page
77
page
78
page
79
page
80
page
81
page
82
page
83
page
84
page
85
page
86
page
87
page
88
page
89
page
90
page
91
page
92
page
93
page
94
page
95
page
96
page
97
page
98
page
99
page
100
page
101
page
102
page
103
page
104
page
105
page
106
page
107
page
108
page
109
page
110
page
111
page
112
page
113
page
114
page
115
page
116
page
117
page
118
page
119
page
120
page
121
Transcript 
‫)‪VP-DX100(i‬‬
‫‪VP-DX100H‬‬
‫‪VP-DX102‬‬
‫)‪VP-DX103(i‬‬
‫‪VP-DX104‬‬
‫)‪VP-DX105(i‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪ Samsung‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﭙﺎﺳﮕﺰﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:03‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 1‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ ٣ ١\٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD-VIDEO‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ٣ ١/٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ )‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ( ‪) DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL‬ﺩﻭﻻﻳﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ٢.٧‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪ ١١٢) (١۶:٩‬ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢.٧‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪ ،(١۶:٩‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ١١٢‬ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻲ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﺪ ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫)ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ‪/٣۴X‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪(١٢٠٠X‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،DV Media PRO‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٩٨~٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪ii_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:09‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 2‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺮگ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺟﺪﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ!‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺑﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪CLASS ١ LASER PRODUCT‬‬
‫‪LASER PRODUKT ١ KLASSE‬‬
‫‪LASER LAITE ١ LUOKAN‬‬
‫‪LASER APPARAT ١ KLASS‬‬
‫‪١ PRODUCTO LASER CLASE‬‬
‫‪iii_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:09‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ MPEG 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ MPEG4‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )‪ (SD-VIDEO‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻛﭙﻲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﻳﺎً ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪iv_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:09‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 4‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ )‪ VP-DX100(i)/DX100H/DX102/DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ “‪ ”i‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ” ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i) .‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫)‪ DX105(i‬ﻭ‪ VP-DX100(i)/DX100H/DX102/DX103(i)/DX104‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ) ‪ VP-DX105( i‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫)‬
‫•‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫( ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺨﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪ Samsung‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Microsoft‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Apple Computer, Inc‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ “‪ ”TM‬ﻭ “‪ ”R‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ “‪ ”Dolby‬ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ D‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ‪ Dolby Laboratories‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ © ‪ ٢٠٠۶‬ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻓﺮﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‪.http://www.freetype.org :‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪v_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:10‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 5‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ )‪ (LCD‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻲ ﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫‬‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻤﻲ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ!‬
‫ﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ!‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ١۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬‫ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺘﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪vi_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:10‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 6‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ‬‫ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﮔﺰﻭﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺰﻟﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬‫ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭژﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺣﺸﺮﻩ ﻛﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺣﺸﺮﻩ ﻛﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺣﺸﺮﻩ ﻛﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ ﻟﻨﺰ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ ٣ ١/٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ )‪٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ ﻟﻨﺰ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻦ ‪ ٣ ١/٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ )‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﭘﻴﻜﺎپ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﭘﻴﻜﺎپ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻜﺎپ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﺋﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﻠﻌﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪vii_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:10‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 7‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪٠۶‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪٠٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢۶‬‬
‫‪٢۶‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ))‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ) (‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪٠٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:10‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 2‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣۵‬‬
‫‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﻳﺎﻥ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(EASY.Q‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪۴٠‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪۴٩‬‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ (‬
‫‪۵٢‬‬
‫‪۵۵‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۵٨‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶١‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪۴٠‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪۵٢‬‬
‫‪٠٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:11‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 3‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪۶٢‬‬
‫‪۶٣‬‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪٨۶‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪DVD/HDD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫)‪ VP-DX100i/DX103i/DX105i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪٩۴‬‬
‫‪٩۵‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪DV Media PRO‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪۶٢‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪٨۶‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪٠۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:11‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 4‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪١٠۴‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪٠۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:11‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 5‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :١‬ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٨‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٢٩ ,٢٨‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ( )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ۵۴~۵٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪DVD +R DL‬‬
‫‪DVD +RW‬‬
‫‪DVD -RW‬‬
‫‪DVD -RW‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪ DVD+RW، DVD+R DL‬ﻭ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ‪ VR‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٣١-٣٠‬‬
‫‪٠۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:12‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 6‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٢‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۵۶ ,٣٧~٣٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٣٧ ٣٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫����‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٣‬ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ /‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۵٩~۵٨ ,٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٩٧ ,٩٠~٨۶‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ )ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۴۶~۴٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :۴‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫‪‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫‪٠٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:14‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 7‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫‪DVD +R‬‬
‫‪DL‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪DVD -RW‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪DVD +RW‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ VR‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ۵ CD/DVD‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ )‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ(‬‫ ‪) CD/CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-ROM/DVD+R‬ﺗﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ(‪) DVD-RAM/DVD-R /‬ﺩﻭﻻﻳﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﭘﻲ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪MO، MD، iD، LD ،‬‬‫ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺑﺖ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫” ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ TDK, MKM, Verbatim‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ “‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪  (DVD-RW‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠٣~١٠٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٠٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:14‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 8‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫✪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪(DV Media PRO‬‬
‫)‪ (VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(AA-E٩‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ‪(CR٢٠٢۵ :‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ))‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫))‪ (VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫))‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ ٣ ١/٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ‬
‫)‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ‪ Samsung‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ۵٣~۵٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٠٩_Farsi‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫����‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ )) ‪ VP-DX102/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻼﺏ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫‪١٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:18‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 10‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫(‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪EASY Q‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪FINALIZE‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )‪(DISC/CARD‬‬
‫)) ‪ (VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ )ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪/‬ﭼﭗ‪/‬ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(W/T ،‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﭘﻴﭻ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )) ‪ (VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪١١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:19‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 11‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ )‪/(W/T‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) PHOTO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ / MODE‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ) (‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ) ((‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ACCESS/CHG‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪OPEN‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ‪AV‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ /‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪AV‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ‪DC IN‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫‪١٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:21‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 12‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ) ‪( /‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ) (‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ ) (‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ) ‪/ /‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪PHOTO‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ )‪(W/T‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ) ‪( /‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ) (‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:22‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 13‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪﻚ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪) BATT .‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ )‪ (+‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ۶‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ” ‪ “01/01/2008 00:00‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻜﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ ‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪I .٢‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ )‪ (+‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ )‪ (‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ )‪(‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺒﺮﻙ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﺭﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻓﺮﻭ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺎ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫‪١۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:24‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 14‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺷﺴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،PHOTO‬ﻭ ﺍﻫﺮﻡﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻼﺏ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪°١۴٠‬‬
‫‪١۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:30‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 15‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪) BATT.‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ‪ Samsung‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫�����‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:38‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 16‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻭ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ١٠۴‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ )ﺍﺯﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻭﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫• ﻣﺪﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ ٢۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﻣﺪﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ٧٧‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮﺵ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺖ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ” ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ”‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ ”6‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:38‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 17‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ IA-BP٨٠W‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ DC IN/USB/AV‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ DC IN‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪) ACCESS/CHG‬ﺷﺎﺭژ( ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪) ACCESS/CHG‬ﺷﺎﺭژ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪DC IN‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪) ACCESS/CHG‬ﺷﺎﺭژ( ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫����‬
‫‪١٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:40‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 18‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ‪ ۵٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪ ۶۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﻋﺎﻟﻲ” ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ” ﻳﺎ “ﻋﺎﺩﻱ” ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ(‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﺍﺭﻙ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:40‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 19‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ‪ Samsung‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺒﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:40‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 20‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫����‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ MODE‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ CARD‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪. DVD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۵٧~۵۶‬‬‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ) ( ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ) ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ) ( ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ) ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ (١٠۶~١٠۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪<DVD‬‬
‫>ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪<DVD‬‬
‫>ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫“ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ” ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪Min‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪Hour‬‬
‫‪00 :‬‬
‫‪Year‬‬
‫‪/ 2008‬‬
‫‪Month‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪٢١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:42‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 21‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪1/50‬‬
‫‪1/25‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ * ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ ٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ( ﻳﺎ ‪) ‬ﺿﺒﻂ((‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﺩﻳﺴﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪(DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ*‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ* )) ‪ VP-DX102/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ*‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‪/‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ*‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ*‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ*‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ*‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪EASY.Q / (AE‬‬
‫‪٢٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:44‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 22‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪0:00:59‬‬
‫‪In‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ VP-DX100i/DX103i/DX105i ) AV‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ )ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ(‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﺩﻳﺴﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ )‪/-RW Video‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪٢٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:45‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 23‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [64 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪4830‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ( ﻳﺎ ●)ﺿﺒﻂ((‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ*‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ*‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫)‪. ((VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬‬
‫‪٢۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:47‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 24‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ(‬
‫‪0:00:03‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪Activate‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Control‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ )ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ(‬
‫ﻛﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪-‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )ﻋﻜﺲ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫‪9/9‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Remote‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪Activate‬‬
‫‪Control‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪-‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫)‪. ((VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬‬
‫‪٢۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:49‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 25‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬
‫(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪) OSD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ /‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪ /‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪٢۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:51‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 26‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٩‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺻﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻛﻮﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻀﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:52‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 27‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (OSD‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪OSD‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “‪ ”Language‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ “‪ ”Language‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺷﺐ‬
‫‪20%‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪٢٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:55‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 28‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪/‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ )ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ( ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ”ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ “,‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﻟﻐﻮ” ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫“ ‪ ” 01/01/2008 00:00‬ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١۴‬‬
‫• ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠۴٠‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪Min‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪Hour‬‬
‫‪00 :‬‬
‫‪Year‬‬
‫‪/ 2008‬‬
‫‪Month‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٢٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:56‬‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 29‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ )ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫����‬
‫����‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ CARD‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪(DISC  CARD) .‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪.DVD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۵٧~۵۶‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ٣ ١/٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ( ‪ DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R‬ﻳﺎ ‪DVD+R DL‬‬
‫)ﺩﻭﻻﻳﻪ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫����‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ OPEN‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻜﺎپ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ ACCESS/CHG‬ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ (VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٣٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:59‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 30‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻜﺎپ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ : DVD-R/+R DL‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ : DVD-RW‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Video‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ “ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ” ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ؟‬
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪.DVD‬‬‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺒﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪.‬‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫>ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪<.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ Video‬ﻭ ‪VR‬‬
‫‪) Video‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ(‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) VR‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ : ( VR‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪DVD‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ : DVD+RW‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:00‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 31‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ OPEN‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪/‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﺭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻜﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ )‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪/‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪DVD+RW/-RW/-R‬‬
‫‪DVD+R DL‬‬
‫‪ ١.۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢.۶‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٣۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۵٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٠۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻣﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪“ :‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪“ ”،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ” ﻭ “ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪”.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:01‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 32‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ (VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ‪ LCD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫)ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ(‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ) ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ (‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫����‬
‫����‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪٣٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:07‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 33‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ٧٢٠X۵٧۶‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﻬﻮﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺪﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٧٧~۶۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۵٣‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪DVD-R/+RW/+R DL/ -RW‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،(Video‬ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻇﺮﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻬﺘﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:08‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 34‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﻳﺎﻥ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(EASY.Q‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺁﺳﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EASY Q‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EASY Q‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ “ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪“ ،”(AE‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ”‪“ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻫﻲ”‪“ ،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪“ ،”(DIS‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ”‪،‬‬‫“ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ”‪“ ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ”‪“ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ”‪“ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ” ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫(( ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ)‪) (DIS‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ )‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪EASY.Q‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EASY Q‬ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫(( ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ)‪) (DIS‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ )‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫• ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ “ﺭﻫﺎﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪ ”!Q.EASY‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ، Menu‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ EASY Q‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY Q‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:10‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 35‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PHOTO‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PHOTO‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ “ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ٨٠٠x۶٠٠‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪0:00:59‬‬
‫‪012‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪٣۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:11‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 36‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ( ﻳﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﺩﻭﺭ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ٣۴x‬ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪١٢٠٠x‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ )‪ (W/T‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪) T‬ﺗﻠﻪ( ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﳕﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪) W‬ﻭﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ( ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣۴x‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٢٠٠x‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫“ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ” ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٢٠٠x‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٠.٣٩‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﻭﺍﻳﺪ( ﻭ ‪ ۵٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ )ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ١٩.۶٨‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪  .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫����‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ‪W :‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪ ‪T :‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪٣٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:13‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 37‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﭘﺨﺶ” ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪) OSD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫����‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪0:00:59‬‬
‫‪012‬‬
‫‪٣٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:14‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 38‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻭ ‪ ١٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪0:00:59‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪012‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ /‬ﻣﻜﺚ ‪ /‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i )) .( /‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪012‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) RPS‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ(‪x٢  x١۶  x٢ :‬‬
‫‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) FPS‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ(‪x٢  x١۶  x٢ :‬‬
‫‬‫‪0:00:59‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i )) .( /‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪012‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i )) .( /‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ) (‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ) ( ﻳﺎ ) ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫>) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ<‬
‫ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪0:00:59‬‬
‫‪٣٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:17‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 39‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻱ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﭘﺨﺶ” ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺣﺬﻑ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )“ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ” ﻳﺎ “ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ”(‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫“ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ”‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ )ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺍﺟﺮﺍ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫“ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ”‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺍﺟﺮﺍ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۵‬‬
‫)‬
‫((‬
‫)‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫‪7/12‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫‪۴٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:20‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 40‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ” ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻜﺚ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ “‪ ”‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ “‪ ”‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ؟ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ”.‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫((‬
‫) )‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫‪11/12‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪0:00:59/0:02:00‬‬
‫‪011‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪0:00:59/0:02:00‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ؟‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۴١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:23‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 41‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫)‬
‫((‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ DVD-RW ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭼﻜﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠٨.JAN.٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠٨.JAN.١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۶‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٠:٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٠:٣٠‬‬
‫‪١١:٣٠‬‬
‫‪١۴:٠٠‬‬
‫‪١۶:١٠‬‬
‫‪١٨:٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠:٠٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۴٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:27‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 42‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ)ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺑﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺍﺟﺮﺍ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ “ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ؟” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶۴‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ) (‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ!‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫‪7/12‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ؟‬
‫ﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫‪۴٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:37‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 43‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫•‬
‫)ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺍﺟﺮﺍ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ “ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ؟” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫‪8/12‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ؟‬
‫ﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫‪۴۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:40‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 44‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺣﺬﻑ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫•‬
‫)ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺍﺟﺮﺍ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ “ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ”.‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫‪7/12‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫‪۴۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:42‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 45‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ” ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻜﺚ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ “‪ ”‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ “‪ ”‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ؟ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ”.‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫‪11/12‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪0:00:59/0:02:00‬‬
‫‪011‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪0:00:59/0:02:00‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ؟‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۴۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:45‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 46‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻱ ‪ DVD-RW/-R/+R DL‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ” ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ FINALIZE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ “‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ‪DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻌﺪﻱ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺍﺟﺮﺍ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺧﺮﻭﺝ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ) ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ‪ ٨‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻬﻨﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-R/+R DL‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪ‪،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) )‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫‪+R DL‬‬
‫((‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪. .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫‪01/JAN/2008‬‬
‫]ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ[ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪VR‬‬
‫‪0:10:00‬‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[ ‪0:20:00‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪...‬‬
‫ﺿﺪﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫‪۴٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:48‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 47‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪،‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ ٣ ١/٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ )‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ’‪ ‘Windows Media Player‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Microsoft، Windows‬ﻭ ﻟﻮﮔﻮﻱ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻜﺚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫➟‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫➟‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ‪) DVD‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ (DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪RW-‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪R DL+‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪R-‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ /‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪) DVD-R/-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫(‪ +R DL/‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫➟‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫➟‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪:VR‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪RW-‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪R DL+‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪R-‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪۴٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:54‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 48‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫) )‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Video‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ FINALIZE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺍﺟﺮﺍ” ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ “ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ؟” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ) ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫((‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫‪01/JAN/2008‬‬
‫]ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪ[ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪VR‬‬
‫‪0:10:00‬‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[ ‪0:20:00‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪...‬‬
‫ﺿﺪﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫‪۴٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:55‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 49‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “‪ ”Video‬ﻳﺎ “‪ ”VR‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ﻓﺮﻣﺖ” ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ) ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎً‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠٣~١٠٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) )‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫((‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫>ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪<DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫>ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪<DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪۵٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:57‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 50‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫) )‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫”ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪” “،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪” “،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪” “،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ“ ﻭ ”ﺧﺎﻟﯽ“ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﻋﻘﺐ“ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ“ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ “‪ ”Delete‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “‪ ”Done‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫“ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ” ﻋﻮﺽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫‪+R DL‬‬
‫((‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫‪01/JAN/2008‬‬
‫]ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ[ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪VR‬‬
‫‪0:10:00‬‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[ ‪0:20:00‬‬
‫_‪02/JAN/2008‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫‪Done‬‬
‫‪4 5‬‬
‫‪9 0‬‬
‫^ ‪/‬‬
‫‪, .‬‬
‫) (‬
‫&‪%‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫*‬
‫~‬
‫”‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫‪1 2‬‬
‫‪6 7‬‬
‫ ‪+‬‬‫? !‬
‫; ‪:‬‬
‫‪@#‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪b c‬‬
‫‪g h‬‬
‫‪l m‬‬
‫‪q r‬‬
‫‪vw‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪DE‬‬
‫‪I J‬‬
‫‪NO‬‬
‫‪ST‬‬
‫‪XY‬‬
‫‪ABC‬‬
‫‪FGH‬‬
‫‪KLM‬‬
‫‪PQR‬‬
‫‪U VW‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫‪02/JAN/2008‬‬
‫]ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ[ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪VR‬‬
‫‪0:10:00‬‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[ ‪0:20:00‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫‪۵١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:42:59‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 51‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪) SD‬ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﻭ ‪MMC‬‬
‫)ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﺟﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﭙﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ SD‬ﻭ ‪ MMC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ‪ RS MMC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Mini SD‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ )ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١.٢۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۵٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:03‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 52‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪SD‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) MMC‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ(‬
‫>‪<MMC‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ ،MMC‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪<SD‬‬
‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫>ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ<‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻠﻌﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:03‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 53‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫• ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ “‪) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ(” ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪JEITA‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﻭ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ژﺍﭘﻦ( ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ DCF‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD‬ﻭ ‪ MMC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪) SLC‬ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻚ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ(‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪) MLC‬ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ(‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﺍً ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪”.Low speed card“ :‬‬
‫‪۵۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:03‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 54‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ ١٢٨‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢۵۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۶۴‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ١٢٨‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢۵۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪۶٠٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪١٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪٢۴٠٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪۴٨٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪٩٧۴٠‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:03‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 55‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ‪ LCD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ(‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ) ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ )●( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۶٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ٧٢٠X۵٧۶‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [64 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪4830‬‬
‫����‬
‫����‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۵۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:11‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 56‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ VP-DX104/DX105( i )) ١٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [64 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪4830‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ) ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٠‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PHOTO‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ “ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ٨٠٠x۶٠٠‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫����‬
‫ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪۵٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:15‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 57‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ VP-DX104/DX105( i )) ١٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )‪(x٢‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪) OSD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫����‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0012‬‬
‫‪0:00:03‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫‪0:00:03‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫‪0:00:03‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫‪۵٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:17‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 58‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫• ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ )‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ )ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫����‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0009‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ” ‪“ ‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫‪۵٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:21‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 59‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ) (‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻚ ﻧﻴﺪ )“ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﻳﺎ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ”(‪ ،‬ﺱ ﭘﺲﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ(‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0009‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0009‬‬
‫‪۶٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:23‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 60‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ »ﭘﺨﺶ« ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ) (‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺣﺬﻑ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )“ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ” ﻳﺎ “ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ”(‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• “ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ”‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• “ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ”‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ(‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0009‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫‪۶١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:25‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 61‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫✪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫����‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ) (‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﻭ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ” ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻜﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫����‬
‫‪0:00:59/0:01:00‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪۶٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:30‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 62‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪DISC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪16:9‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ))‪ VP-DX102/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪CARD‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫‪۶٨‬‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪۵١~۴٧‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪ : ‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ : X ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪۶٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:31‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 63‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫‪DISC‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ)‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ )ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪CARD‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪۴٠,۶١‬‬
‫‪۴١,۴۶‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪ : ‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ : X ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ))‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﺯﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪DISC‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪CARD‬‬
‫) ‪ DX100i/DX103i/DX105i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪PC Cam‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫‬‫ﺁﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺷﺐ‬
‫‪٪٢٠‬‬
‫‬‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪۶۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:32‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 64‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺣﻞ‪/‬ﺑﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻮﺳﻮ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻭ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺮﻭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﮔﻠﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ “ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪ ”(AE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:33‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 65‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ WB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ )ﻛﻠﻮﺯﺁپ( ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣٢٠٠K‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ “‪ WB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ” ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲء ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮگ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻲ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ”‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺿﺨﻴﻢ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪۶۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:35‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 66‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ )ﻧﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ “ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ”)‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٧۶‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻲء ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻫﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪،DVD‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪xx‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ “‪ ”٠‬ﻭ “‪ ”٢٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ‪ (xx‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻜﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ‪ OK‬ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ 23‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۶٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:36‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 67‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )ﺿﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪ ”(AE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺎﺭﺷﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻲ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY Q‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ “ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪ ”(DIS‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ “ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪ :(DIS‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ “ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪ :(DIS‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪“،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪ :(DIS‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ‪ ٣۴x‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ “ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪ ”(DIS‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ “ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪ ”(DIS‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫“ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪”.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:36‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 68‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺧﻼﻕ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ١٠ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ )ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪﻱ )ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻘﺎﺷﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻘﺎﺷﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫“ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ” ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ “ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ” ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ EASY Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ “ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪“ ”,2‬ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ” “ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ” “ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ ”1‬ﻭ “ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ ”2‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ “ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ )‪ ”(DIS‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫“ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ” ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪“ ”2‬ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ” “ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ” “ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ ”1‬ﻳﺎ “ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ ”2‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪۶٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:38‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 69‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ(‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪،DVD‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺧﻼﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ )ﻛﻠﻮﺯﺁپ( ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺩﺳﺘﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‬
‫( ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‬
‫( ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ) ‪ ( /‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ<‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﺻﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫>ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ<‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ )ﻭﺿﻮﺡ( ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:40‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 70‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ” ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ ١/۴٠٠٠ ،١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/۵٠٠ ،١/٢۵٠ ،١/١٢٠ ،١/۵٠‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫‪١/XX‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٠٠٠/١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺩﺳﺘﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ‪١/XX‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻜﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫‪ 1/50‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫‪۵٠/١‬‬
‫‪١٢٠/١‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠/١ ,۵٠٠/١ ,٢۵٠/١‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠/١ ,۴٠٠٠/١ ,٢٠٠٠/١‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪ ١/۵٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﻜﺘﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ‪ ١/١٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺭﺥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺭﻭﻟﺮ ﻛﻮﺳﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﮔﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:41‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 71‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪ ”(AE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪ ١/١٠٠٠‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪16:9‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪) ١۶:٩‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،١۶:٩‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪) SF‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‪) F ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ﻭ ‪N‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ »ﻋﺎﻟﻲ« ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ »ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ« )‪ (VBR‬ﻛﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ VBR‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:42‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 72‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ” ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ” ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬‫ﺷﺪﻩ؛ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺑﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ<‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫>ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ<‬
‫‪٧٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:43‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 73‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪1/25‬‬
‫‪1/13‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫‪1/25‬‬
‫‪1/13‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ »ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ« ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪“ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪“ ”،(AE‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪“ ”،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ‪“ ”،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪“ ”،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ”‬
‫)“ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪“ ”،2‬ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ‪“ ”،‬ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ‪“ ”،‬ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ ”1‬ﻭ “ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪.(”2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ )‪ ،(DIS‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ )) ‪ VP-DX102/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ‪ LED‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺯﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ۶.۶‬ﻓﻮﺕ )‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ((‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:44‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 74‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ “ﻓﻴﺪﺭ” ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪“ ،‬ﻓﻴﺪﺭ” ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﻣﺤﻮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ )ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪٢.٣۵:١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪“ ،‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ” ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻠﻴﺐ )ﻛﺮﺍﺱ( ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:45‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 75‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪) ٣۴x‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣۴x‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ١٢٠٠x‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣۴x‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﺎ ‪ 100‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ 200‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫)‪ 200‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‪ 400 ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 1200‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ( ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 400‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ 1200‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫• ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻭﻡ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ “ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪“ ”،EASY.Q“ ”، (DIS‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‪“ ”،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ” )“ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪”2‬‬
‫“ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ” “ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ” “ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ ”1‬ﻭ “ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ (”2‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪“ ”،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ” )”ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪“ ”2‬ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ” “ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ” “ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ ”1‬ﻭ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ “ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪“ ”، (DIS‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‪“ ”،‬‬
‫“ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪ (”2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)“ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‪ ”EASY Q“ ”,‬ﻓﻘﻂ”((‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣۴x‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫‪٧۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:46‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 76‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪٠٠٠١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ “ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ” ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:46‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 77‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ : 56 MB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ‪-‬‬
‫‪: 427 MB‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٧٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:47‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 78‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ”‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫‪01/01/2008‬‬
‫‪00:00‬‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ “ ‪ ”01/01/2008 00:00‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺗﺎﺭیﻚ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣۵‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣۵‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ 18‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ 18‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪٧٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:49‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 79‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،PHOTO‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ” ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:50‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 80‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ) ) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪) OSD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ OSD‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ OSD‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫) ) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﭼﺎپ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫)‪ VP-DX100i/DX103i/DX105i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:51‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫‪٨١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 81‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫“ﺁﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺷﺐ” ‪“ ‬ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻋﺸﻖ” ‪“ ‬ﺑﻨﻔﺶ ﺍﺳﺮﺍﺭﺁﻣﻴﺰ” ‪“  ”Sunny Orange“ ‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﻪ”‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫“‪”٪۶٠“  ”٪۴٠“  ”٪٢٠“  ”٪٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫“‪”Svenska“”Nederlands”“Português”“Español”“Italiano”“Deutsch”“Français”“한국어”“English‬‬
‫“‪“中文”“Русский”“Украϊнська”“Magyar”“Slovensky”“Česky”“Polski”“Dansk”“Norsk”“Suomi‬‬
‫“‪”‬‬
‫“‪” ”Türkçe“” ไทย‬‬
‫“‪”IsiZulu“‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ “‪ ”Language‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻃﺮﺯﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ “ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ” ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪”.‬‬‫ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ”ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ »ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ« ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )‪ ,MENU‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ,‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻤﺮﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)).‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٨٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:54‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 82‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DPOF‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ‪ ، PictBridge‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DPOF‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻻﺑﺮﺍﺗﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ) ( ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ “ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ)‪ ”(DPOF‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ )“ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ” ﻳﺎ “ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ”( ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫“ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ”‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ” ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫“ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ”‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺑﻠﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫“ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ )‪ ”(DPOF‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ) ( ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ” ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ MISC‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭼﺎپ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0012‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ)‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0012‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0002‬‬
‫‪1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ)‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪٨٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:43:59‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 83‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ‪PICTBRIDGE‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DPOF‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “‪ ”PictBridge‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ) ( ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ”USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “‪ ”.PictBridge‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨١‬‬
‫)ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ” ‪“ ‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪”USB‬‬
‫•‬
‫“‪ ”PictBridge‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﭼﺎپ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﻛﭙﻲ ﻫﺎ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪100-0012‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪٨۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:02‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 84‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ” ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ DPOF‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “‪ ”PictBridge‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ “ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ”USB‬ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪Pictbridge‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻫﻮ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “‪ ”PictBridge‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ “ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ” ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ™‪ PictBridge‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ( ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‪ Canon، Fuji، Olympus، Seiko Epson‬ﻭ ‪ Sony‬ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪12/12‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪100-0012‬‬
‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬
‫‪٨۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:03‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 85‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ PAL‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺗﻚ ﻓﻴﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ‪ AV‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺯﺭﺩ( ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭼﭗ)ﺳﻔﻴﺪ(‪/‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ)ﻗﺮﻣﺰ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ‪ ”AV‬ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ VP-DX100i/DX103i/DX105i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺸﮕﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ “‪) ”line‬ﺧﻂ( ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i ) ) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬‫ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬‫ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٣‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫����‬
‫‪٨۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:07‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 86‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﺶ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ )‪ (Audio L‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ “ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﺯﻳﻮﻥ” ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) OSD،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨١‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪DISC‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪(١۶:٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪۴:٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪١۶:٩‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ :16:9‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ ‪۴:٣‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ :16:9‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‬
‫‪CARD‬‬
‫•‬
‫))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( •‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ “ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ”16:9‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:07‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 87‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪DVD/HDD‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD/HDD‬ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﭘﺨﺶ” ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ “ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ” ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۴۶~۴٠‬‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ‪ ”AV‬ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ VP-DX100 i /DX103 i /DX105 i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨١‬‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ،OPEN‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﺎً ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪DVD/HDD‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫����‬
‫‪٨٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:09‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 88‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ »ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ« ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ AV‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫����‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AV‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪0:00:59‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ ) ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ “ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ” ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ AV‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫‪012‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻐﻮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• “ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ” ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ “ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ” ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ MENU‬ﻳﺎ ‪ PHOTO‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩ )ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ‪ ”AV‬ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ VP-DX100 i /DX103 i /DX105 i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬
‫‪٨٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:12‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 89‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫)‪ VP-DX100i/DX103i/DX105i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ AV‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ‪”AV‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD/HDD‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪،DVD/HDD‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﺯﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍ )ﭼﭗ(‪ -‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠٣~١٠٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪DVD/HDD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD/HDD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻜﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD/HDD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪DVD/HDD‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫����‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬
‫‪0:01:00‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Macrovision‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:15‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 90‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫✪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪DV Media PRO‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ DV Media PRO‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،٣٢bit)، XP ۶۴bit)Windows Vista‬ﻳﺎ ‪٢٠٠٠‬‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۴ ®Intel® Pentium‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪CPU‬‬
‫‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪USB1.1/2.0‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪ ٧۶٨ ١٠٢۴x‬ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ ٢۴‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ ۵٫۵ Internet Explorer‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬
‫‪ ٩٫٠ DirectX‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﻳﺎ ‪ USB 1.1‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ USB .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (USB 2.0‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Macintosh‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫™‪ Intel® Pentium III‬ﻳﺎ ™‪ ۴ Pentium‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ‪ Intel Corporation‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Microsoft® Corporation‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:15‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 91‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪DV Media PRO‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ DV Media PRO‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪Video Codec ,DV Driver, DirectX٩.٠ :‬‬
‫‬‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ‪Video Codec ,DV Driver, DirectX٩.٠ : USB‬‬
‫‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ!‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ “‪ ”Start‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “‪ ”Run‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ“‪ ”D:Drive‬ﺑﺎﺯﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ “‪ ”D:\autorun.exe‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ – ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ DV‬ﻭ ‪٩٫٠ DirectX‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ DV‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ “‪) ”DV Driver‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ (DV‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ‪) USB‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‬‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ “‪) ”Confirm‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﮔﺮ “‪ ”٩٫٠ DirectX‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ DV‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ “‪ ،”٩٫٠ DirectX‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ٩٫٠ DirectX‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ‪Video Codec -‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ “‪ ”Video Codec‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ Video Codec‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:16‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 92‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ‪Quick Time -‬‬
‫‪ ”Quick Time“ .١‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ QuickTime‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ‪ Apple‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ‪ ٣۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫)‪ (VR‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photo Express‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪,٩٫٠ DV Driver, DirectX :‬‬
‫‪Video Codec‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻭﺏ ﻛﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪Video Codec ,٩٫٠ DV Driver, DirectX :‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ‪ Video Codec ,٩٫٠ DV Driver, DirectX‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪DV‬‬
‫‪ Media Pro‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ “‪“ ”Digital Signature not found‬ﺍﻣﻀﺎء ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﺪ” ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻮﮔﻮﻱ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺖ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‘)‪ ’Continue(C‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:16‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 93‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ”USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ‪/‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ‬
‫‪ ،USB‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (USB 2.0‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ “ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ” ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ‪ ”USB‬ﻳﺎ “ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪”USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺗﻮﻗﻒ” ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ” ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ‪ USB HUB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:17‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 94‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٣٠ ,٢١‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ DVD) .‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪: Windows® XP/Vista‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ “‪) ”Removable Disk‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “‪) ”Open folders to view files using Windows Explorer‬ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ (Windows Explorer‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ “‪””OK‬‬
‫)ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪:٢٠٠٠ ®Windows‬‬
‫‪ .a‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ “‪ ”My Computer‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ “‪) ”Removable Disk‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ( ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ “‪ ”My Computer‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .b‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ “‪) ”Removable Disk‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ( ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ “‪) ”Removable Disk‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ( ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٩۴‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ “‪) ”Removable Disk‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ “‪My‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ ”Computer‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ “‪ ”Removable Disk‬ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪MSAMSUNG‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫‪٩۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:18‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 95‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ DPOF‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ..SMOV٠٠٠١ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ١٠١SSMOV‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ DCAM٠٠٠١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ ١٠٠SSDVC  ١٠١SSDVC‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪) MPEG4‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ( ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ “‪ ”AVI.‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٧٢٠X۵٧۶‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪) JPEG‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ( ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ “‪ ”.JPG‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٨٠٠x۶٠٠‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ /‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:18‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 96‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ »ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ« ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٩۶~٩۵‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪٩٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:19‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 97‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DV Driver, Video Codec‬ﻭ ‪ ٩٫٠ DirectX‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ )ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ‪ (NetMeeting‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Net Meeting‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ fps ١٢.۵‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫)‪ VGA)۶۴٠X۴٨٠‬ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪. USB 2.0‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﻭ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Windows Messenger‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:19‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 98‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٨ ،١۶‬‬
‫‬‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۵٢ ,٣٢‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻛﭙﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻤﺪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﺎ )ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﭙﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٩٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:19‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 99‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ )ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺶ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩﻭﺧﺎﻙ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‬‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫‬‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮء ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ۵۵~۵٢ ,٣٢~٣٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:20‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 100‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﺍﻍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﻮﺯﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻴﺴﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ١۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫‬‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﻮﻙ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ -‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ Samsung‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ۵٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‪ ٠ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠۴‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ ٢٠- :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ -۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٢٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫• ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٩~١۶‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:20‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 101‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٣٧~٣٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪۴‬‬
‫)ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪( ۵‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻱ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴۶-۴٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪) ٧‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫)‪( ˝٢/١٣‬‬
‫‪DVD+R DL‬‬
‫)‪( ˝٢/١٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ١.۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ٢.۶‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫)‪(” ٢/١٣‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW ( ˝٢/١٣‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪ ١.۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ١.۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١.۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪ : ‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ : X ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ : – ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Video‬ﻳﺎ ‪ VR‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺸﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:20‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 102‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ۵٠/۶٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ PAL‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪.(PAL-NTSC‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪/‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﺮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮋﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻊ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﭼﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻠﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻴﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻭژ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺳﻌﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻳﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺭﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪/‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺎﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ژﺍﭘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺰﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻴﭙﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:21‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 103‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻏﻴﺮﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ!‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ “ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ” ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ!‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪ!‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﻤﺨﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻟﺮﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW/+RW‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ DVD-R, DVD+R DL, DVD-RW‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ .DVD+RW‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ +RW/–RW‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺧﺮﺍﺵ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺁﻣﻴﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ “ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ” ﻳﺎ “ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠۴_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:22‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 104‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪...‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫“ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ...‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪”.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ!‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ!‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﻤﺨﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ( ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻇﺮﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۵٣~۵٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۵٣~۵٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠۵_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:22‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 105‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) PictBridge‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﻨﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﭘﺨﺸﻤﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎً ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﻮء ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻢ؟‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺭﺥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ؟‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ‬
‫‬‫ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ Samsung‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠۶_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:23‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 106‬‬
‫✪‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ ”6‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪“ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ”.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻧﻮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪/‬ﭼﭗ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﺲ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ LCD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٠۶-١٠۴‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:23‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 107‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺗﻌﺮﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٠۶‬‬
‫• ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻧﺎﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۴٨-۴٧‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ‪ (SD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ‪ (SD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻛﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ •‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ »ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ« ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.( ) .‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺗﻌﺮﻕ(‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٠۶‬‬
‫‪١٠٨_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:23‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 108‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﺌﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫“ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ” ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ” ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۵۴-۵٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪CARD‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (۴:٣/١۶:٩‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:24‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 109‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ” ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪“ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪ ”(AE‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۶۵‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ “ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ” ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۶۶‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ )ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﺩﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵۴~۵٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٠_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:24‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 110‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﭼﭗ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ (AV‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٨٧~٨۶‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ )ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ (16:9‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎً ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (USB2.0‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١١_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:24‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 111‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ )ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ( ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١۴‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY Q‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛‬
‫“ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪“ ”،(DIS‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪“ ”،16:9‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‪“ ”،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ‪“ ”،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪“ ”،‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ”‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪/‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪/2‬ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪/1‬ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ )ﺩﺳﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )ﺩﺳﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪16:9‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )ﺩﺳﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ )ﺩﺳﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺯﺍﺋﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪/‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪/2‬ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪/1‬ﭘﺎﺳﺘﻞ‪/2‬ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ)‪(DIS‬‬
‫‪١١٢_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:24‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 112‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ‪VP-DX100(i)/DX100H/DX102/DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i) :‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪/LCD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ٨.۴‬ﻭﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻢ ‪ ٧.۴‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ( ‪ ۶٠/۵٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻨﻴﺮﻭ )ﺿﺒﻂ(‬
‫‪ ۴.۶‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪/LCD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ~ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ~ ‪ ١٠۴‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ~ ‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ -۴‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ~ ‪ ١۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ۵١.۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ )‪ ٢.٠٣‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ٨٧.۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ )‪ ٣.۴۴‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ(‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ ١٢٢‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ )‪ ۴.٨٠‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ(‬
‫‪ ۴٣٩‬ﮔﺮﻡ )‪ ٠.٩٢‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‪ ١۴.٧١ ،‬ﺍﻭﻧﺲ( )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬
‫))‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪) MPEG-2‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ(‪) MPEG-4 ,‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ(‬
‫‪) CCD‬ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ( ‪ ٨٠٠K‬ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪) ٣۴x F١.۶‬ﻧﻮﺭﻱ‪) ١٢٠٠x ،‬ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ ٧٨.٢ ~ f٢.٣‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪Ø٣٠.۵‬‬
‫‪ ٢.٧‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪١١٢k‬‬
‫‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺭﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫‪ Ω ٧۵)١Vp-p‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫‪ -٧.۵‬ﺩﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ )‪ Ω ۶٠٠‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪Mini-B‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ‪ :‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٩‬ﻓﻮﺕ )‪ ١۵‬ﻣﺘﺮ( )ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ١۶.۴‬ﻓﻮﺕ )‪ ۵‬ﻣﺘﺮ( )ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ(‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٣_Farsi‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:25‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 113‬‬
‫ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ‬
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
/www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/se
/www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.kz
www.samsung.uz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.ee
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 114
Contact Centre 
(1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864
(01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864
(1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864
0800-333-3733
4004-0000 ,0800-124-421
(800-SAMSUNG (726-7864
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
(1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
18 24 201 2(0) 0032
844 000 844
Distributor pro Českou republiku :Samsung Zrt., česka organizační složka Vyskočilova 4, 14000 Praha 4
70 19 70 70
515 030-6227
(SAMSUNG (€ 0,15/Min), 08 25 08 65 65 (€ 0,15/Min 3260
(SAMSUNG(726-7864 € 0,14/Min - 01805
(06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864
(800-SAMSUNG (726-7864
710 03 261 2(0) 0035
0900-SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,10/Min
480 815-56
881,022-607-93-33 801 801 0
(80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864
(0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864
30 11 10 902
200 0771-400
(SAMSUNG (726-7864 0845
100 717 0818
(0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
(0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-800-502-0000
8-800-77777
800-7267
800-7267
603 362 1300
(0800SAMSUNG (726-7864
1880 010-6475 ,800-810-5858
4698 - 3698
110011 1800 ,8282 3030
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
(1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864
(1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864
02-689-3232 ,1800-29-3232
0800-329-999
889 588 800 1
11 77 444
(0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
Country
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
NICARAGUA
HONDURAS
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
COLOMBIA
BELGIUM
Region
North America
Latin America
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
EIRE
AUSTRIA
SWITZERLAND
RUSSIA
KAZAHSTAN
UZBEKISTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
TADJIKISTAN
UKRAINE
LITHUANIA
LATVIA
ESTONIA
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
TURKEY
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Middle East & Africa
2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:26
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ‪RoHS‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻛﺪﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻡ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۶‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺩﻣﻴﻢ )‪ (Cd‬ﺳﺮﺏ )‪ ،(Pb‬ﺟﻴﻮﻩ )‪ ،(Pb‬ﻛﺮﻡ ﻫﮕﺰﺍﻭﺍﻭﺍﻻﻥ‬
‫)‪ ،(۶+Cr‬ﺑﻲ ﻓﻨﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻣﻴﻨﻪ )‪ PBB‬ﻫﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻓﻨﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫)‪ PBDE‬ﻫﺎ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:27‬‬
‫‪Code No. AD68-02550M-00‬‬
‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 115‬‬
Related documents
Samsung VP-DX10H راهنمای محصول
Samsung VP-DX10H راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL121 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL121 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST64 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST64 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS42B430P2 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS42B430P2 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST89 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST89 راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB210 راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB210 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS-42C91H راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS-42C91H راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS-42Q91H راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS-42Q91H راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS50B550T2R راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS50B550T2R راهنمای محصول
ADSL/ETHERNET ROUTER WITH WI-FI DSL-2600U/NRU - D-Link
ADSL/ETHERNET ROUTER WITH WI-FI DSL-2600U/NRU - D-Link
ダウンロード
ダウンロード
Samsung LA40N71B راهنمای محصول
Samsung LA40N71B راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS42A410C1 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS42A410C1 راهنمای محصول
Samsung VP-DX100 Brugervejledning
Samsung VP-DX100 Brugervejledning
Samsung DVD-HR775 راهنمای محصول
Samsung DVD-HR775 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS42A450P1 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PS42A450P1 راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB600 راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB600 راهنمای محصول
Samsung SC-DX103 manual do usuário
Samsung SC-DX103 manual do usuário
DEH-4450BT
DEH-4450BT
Samsung WB700 راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB700 راهنمای محصول
FH-XL755BT FH-XL555UI
FH-XL755BT FH-XL555UI
DEH-6450BT DEH-5450SD
DEH-6450BT DEH-5450SD